]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
2009-03-14 Pedro Alves <pedro@codesourcery.com>
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
494@item -E
495@itemx --export-dynamic
496When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502mentioned in the link.
503
504If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507linking the program itself.
508
55255dae 509You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 510be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 511See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 512
36f63dca 513@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
514@cindex big-endian objects
515@cindex endianness
516@kindex -EB
517@item -EB
518Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
519
520@cindex little-endian objects
521@kindex -EL
522@item -EL
523Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 524@end ifclear
252b5132 525
2509a395
SL
526@kindex -f @var{name}
527@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
528@item -f @var{name}
529@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
530When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
531to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
532table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
533symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
534
535If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
536run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
537the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
538first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
539@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
540in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
541Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
542implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
543machine specific performance.
544
545This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
546will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
547
2509a395
SL
548@kindex -F @var{name}
549@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 550@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 551@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
552When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
553the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
554of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
555on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
556
557If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
558run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
559dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
560filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
561found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
562used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
563@var{name}.
564
ff5dcc92 565Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 566toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
567object files.
568@ifclear SingleFormat
569The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 570@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 571@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
572environment variable.
573@end ifclear
574The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
575creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 576
3dbf70a2 577@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -fini=@var{name}
579@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
580When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
581executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
582address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
583the function to call.
584
252b5132
RH
585@kindex -g
586@item -g
587Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
588
2509a395
SL
589@kindex -G @var{value}
590@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 591@cindex object size
2509a395 592@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
593@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
594Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
595@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
596MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
597sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
598
599@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 600@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 601@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 602@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
603@itemx -soname=@var{name}
604When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
605the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
606which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
607linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
608field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
609
610@kindex -i
611@cindex incremental link
612@item -i
613Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
614
3dbf70a2 615@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
616@kindex -init=@var{name}
617@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
618When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
619executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
620of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
621function to call.
622
252b5132 623@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 624@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 625@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 626@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
627@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
628Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
629list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
630If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
631will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
632will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 633
ff5dcc92 634On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
635files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
636and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
637called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
638@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
639indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
640to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
641@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
642
643The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
644specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
645was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
646command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
647archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
648the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
649
ff5dcc92 650See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
651archives multiple times.
652
653You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
654
655@ifset GENERIC
656This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 657if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
658behaviour of the AIX linker.
659@end ifset
660
661@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 662@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 663@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 664@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 665@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
666Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
667for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
668option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
669in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
670on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 671@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
672order in which the options appear.
673
9c8ebd6a
DJ
674If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
675by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
676
252b5132
RH
677@ifset UsesEnvVars
678The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 679@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
680some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
681@end ifset
682
683The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
684@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
685at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
686
687@cindex emulation
688@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 689@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
690Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
691emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
692
693If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
694@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
695
696Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
697configured.
698
699@cindex link map
700@kindex -M
701@kindex --print-map
702@item -M
703@itemx --print-map
704Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
705information about the link, including the following:
706
707@itemize @bullet
708@item
3b83e13a 709Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
710@item
711How common symbols are allocated.
712@item
713All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
714which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
715@item
716The values assigned to symbols.
717
718Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
719involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
720have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
721linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
722of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
723the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
724linker script containing:
725
726@smallexample
727 foo = 1
728 foo = foo * 4
729 foo = foo + 8
730@end smallexample
731
732will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
733option is used:
734
735@smallexample
736 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
737 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
738 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
739@end smallexample
740
741See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
742scripts.
252b5132
RH
743@end itemize
744
745@kindex -n
746@cindex read-only text
747@cindex NMAGIC
748@kindex --nmagic
749@item -n
750@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 751Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 752@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
753
754@kindex -N
755@kindex --omagic
756@cindex read/write from cmd line
757@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 758@item -N
252b5132
RH
759@itemx --omagic
760Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
761not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
762libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
763mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
764is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
765specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
766
767@kindex --no-omagic
768@cindex OMAGIC
769@item --no-omagic
770This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
771sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
772be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
773shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
774
775@kindex -o @var{output}
776@kindex --output=@var{output}
777@cindex naming the output file
778@item -o @var{output}
779@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 780Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
781option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
782script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
783
784@kindex -O @var{level}
785@cindex generating optimized output
786@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 787If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 788the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
789should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
790option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
791the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
792no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
793of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 794
a712da20
NC
795@kindex -q
796@kindex --emit-relocs
797@cindex retain relocations in final executable
798@item -q
799@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 800Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
801Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
802order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
803in larger executables.
804
dbab7a7b
NC
805This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
806
4f471f39
RS
807@kindex --force-dynamic
808@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
809@item --force-dynamic
810Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
811to VxWorks targets.
812
252b5132
RH
813@cindex partial link
814@cindex relocatable output
815@kindex -r
1049f94e 816@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 817@item -r
1049f94e 818@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 819Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 820turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
821linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
822magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
823@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 824@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
825If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
826linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
827constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
828
62bf86b4
HPN
829When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
830partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
831relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
832example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
833with input files in other formats at all.
834
252b5132
RH
835This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
836
837@kindex -R @var{file}
838@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
839@cindex symbol-only input
840@item -R @var{filename}
841@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
842Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
843relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
844to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
845programs. You may use this option more than once.
846
ff5dcc92 847For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 848followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 849the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
850
851@kindex -s
852@kindex --strip-all
853@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 854@item -s
252b5132
RH
855@itemx --strip-all
856Omit all symbol information from the output file.
857
858@kindex -S
859@kindex --strip-debug
860@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 861@item -S
252b5132
RH
862@itemx --strip-debug
863Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
864
865@kindex -t
866@kindex --trace
867@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 868@item -t
252b5132 869@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 870Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
871
872@kindex -T @var{script}
873@kindex --script=@var{script}
874@cindex script files
875@item -T @var{scriptfile}
876@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
877Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 878@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 879@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
880output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
881the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
882specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
883options accumulate.
252b5132 884
14be8564
L
885@kindex -dT @var{script}
886@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
887@cindex script files
888@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
889@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
890Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
891
892This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
893processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
894command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
895@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
896behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
897command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
898the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
899@samp{gcc}).
900
252b5132
RH
901@kindex -u @var{symbol}
902@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
903@cindex undefined symbol
904@item -u @var{symbol}
905@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
906Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
907symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
908modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
909different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
910option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
911
912@kindex -Ur
913@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 914@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
915For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
916@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 917turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
918@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
919It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
920with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
921be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
922@samp{-r} for the others.
923
577a0623
AM
924@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
925@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
926Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
927@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
928missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
929specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
930multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
931input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
932in a linker script.
a854a4a7 933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -v
935@kindex -V
936@kindex --version
937@cindex version
938@item -v
939@itemx --version
940@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 941Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
942lists the supported emulations.
943
944@kindex -x
945@kindex --discard-all
946@cindex deleting local symbols
947@item -x
948@itemx --discard-all
949Delete all local symbols.
950
951@kindex -X
952@kindex --discard-locals
953@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 954@item -X
252b5132 955@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
956Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
957system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
958or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -y @var{symbol}
961@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
962@cindex symbol tracing
963@item -y @var{symbol}
964@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
965Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
966option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
967to prepend an underscore.
968
969This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
970don't know where the reference is coming from.
971
972@kindex -Y @var{path}
973@item -Y @var{path}
974Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
975for Solaris compatibility.
976
977@kindex -z @var{keyword}
978@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
979The recognized keywords are:
980@table @samp
981
982@item combreloc
983Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
984lookup caching possible.
985
986@item defs
560e09e9 987Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 988shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 989
6aa29e7b
JJ
990@item execstack
991Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
992
cd6d6c15
NC
993@item initfirst
994This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
995It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
996before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
997the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
998the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
999objects.
1000
1001@item interpose
1002Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1003but the primary executable.
1004
5fa222e4
AM
1005@item lazy
1006When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1007dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1008the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1009Lazy binding is the default.
1010
cd6d6c15
NC
1011@item loadfltr
1012Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1013runtime.
1014
1015@item muldefs
1016Allows multiple definitions.
1017
1018@item nocombreloc
1019Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1020
1021@item nocopyreloc
1022Disables production of copy relocs.
1023
1024@item nodefaultlib
1025Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1026ignore any default library search paths.
1027
1028@item nodelete
1029Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1030
1031@item nodlopen
1032Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1033
1034@item nodump
1035Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1036
6aa29e7b
JJ
1037@item noexecstack
1038Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1039
1040@item norelro
1041Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item now
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1046when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1047deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1048first called.
1049
1050@item origin
1051Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1052
6aa29e7b
JJ
1053@item relro
1054Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1055
24718e3b
L
1056@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1057Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1058
1059@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1060Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@end table
1063
ece2d90e 1064Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1065
1066@kindex -(
1067@cindex groups of archives
1068@item -( @var{archives} -)
1069@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1070The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1071either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1072
1073The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1074references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1075the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1076archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1077object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1078would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1079they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1080resolved.
1081
1082Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1083it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1084more archives.
1085
69da35b5
NC
1086@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1087@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1088@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1089@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1090Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1091recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1092and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1093the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1094behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1095so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1096restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1097
4a43e768
AM
1098@kindex --as-needed
1099@kindex --no-as-needed
1100@item --as-needed
1101@itemx --no-as-needed
1102This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1103on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1104the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1105on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1106needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1107for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1108which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1109the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1110linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1111@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1112
e56f61be
L
1113@kindex --add-needed
1114@kindex --no-add-needed
1115@item --add-needed
1116@itemx --no-add-needed
1117This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1118DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1119the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1120a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1121@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1122for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1123the default behaviour.
1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1126@item -assert @var{keyword}
1127This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -Bdynamic
1130@kindex -dy
1131@kindex -call_shared
1132@item -Bdynamic
1133@itemx -dy
1134@itemx -call_shared
1135Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1136for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1137default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1138for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1139multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1140@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1141
a1ab1d2a
UD
1142@kindex -Bgroup
1143@item -Bgroup
1144Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1145section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1146object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1147@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1148only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1149
252b5132
RH
1150@kindex -Bstatic
1151@kindex -dn
1152@kindex -non_shared
1153@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1154@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1155@itemx -dn
1156@itemx -non_shared
1157@itemx -static
1158Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1159platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1160variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1161may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1162library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1163option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1164option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1165shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1166references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1167libraries.
252b5132
RH
1168
1169@kindex -Bsymbolic
1170@item -Bsymbolic
1171When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1172definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1173for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1174within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1175platforms which support shared libraries.
1176
40b36307
L
1177@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1178@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1179When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1180symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1181This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1182libraries.
1183
55255dae
L
1184@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1185@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1186Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1187typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1188global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1189within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1190to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1191in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1192which support shared libraries.
1193
1194The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1195scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1196
40b36307
L
1197@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1198@item --dynamic-list-data
1199Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1200
1201@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1202@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1203Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1204is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1205
0b8a70d9
L
1206@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1207@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1208Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1209
252b5132
RH
1210@kindex --check-sections
1211@kindex --no-check-sections
1212@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1213@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1214Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1215been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1216perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1217suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1218allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1219restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1220Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1221force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1222option.
252b5132
RH
1223
1224@cindex cross reference table
1225@kindex --cref
1226@item --cref
1227Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1228generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1229Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1230
1231The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1232easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1233sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1234symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1235definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1236
4818e05f
AM
1237@cindex common allocation
1238@kindex --no-define-common
1239@item --no-define-common
1240This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1241The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1242@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1243
1244The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1245the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1246of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1247forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1248Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1249from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1250This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1251and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1252duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1253paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1254
252b5132 1255@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1256@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1257@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1258Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1259address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1260times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1261limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1262context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1263symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1264constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1265using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1266Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1267space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1268@var{expression}.
1269
1270@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1271@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1272@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1273@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1274@itemx --no-demangle
1275These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1276and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1277present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1278underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1279mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1280different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1281to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1282demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1283is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1284
1285@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1286@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1287@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1288@item -I@var{file}
1289@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1290Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1291generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1292linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1293doing.
1294
7ce691ae 1295@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1296@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1297@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1298@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1299Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1300with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1301
252b5132
RH
1302@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1303@item --force-exe-suffix
1304Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1305
1306If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1307@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1308the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1309option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1310Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1311it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1312
1313@kindex --gc-sections
1314@kindex --no-gc-sections
1315@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1316@item --gc-sections
1317@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1318Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1319targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1320performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1321@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1322
d5465ba2
AM
1323@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1324examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1325symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1326command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1327referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1328libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1329referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1330the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1331relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1332
ac69cbc6
TG
1333This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1334@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1335specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1336a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1337
c17d87de
NC
1338@kindex --print-gc-sections
1339@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1340@cindex garbage collection
1341@item --print-gc-sections
1342@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1343List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1344printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1345collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1346default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1347be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1348line.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@cindex help
1351@cindex usage
1352@kindex --help
1353@item --help
1354Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1355
ea20a7da
CC
1356@kindex --target-help
1357@item --target-help
1358Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1359
2509a395
SL
1360@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1361@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1362Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1363@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1364
1365@cindex memory usage
1366@kindex --no-keep-memory
1367@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1368@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1369symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1370instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1371necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1372while linking a large executable.
1373
1374@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1375@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1376@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1377@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1378Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1379is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1380The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1381behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1382libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1383
aa713662
L
1384@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1385@kindex -z muldefs
1386@item --allow-multiple-definition
1387@itemx -z muldefs
1388Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1389report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1390first definition will be used.
1391
b79e8c78 1392@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1393@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1394@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1395@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1396Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1397This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1398determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1399shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1400how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1401
903249d7
NC
1402The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1403referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1404an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1405a shared library.
1406
1407The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1408libraries specified at link time are that:
1409
1410@itemize @bullet
1411@item
1412A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1413that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1414resolvable at load time.
1415@item
1416There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1417symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1418
1419The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1420select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1421architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1422appropriate memset function.
1423@end itemize
b79e8c78 1424
31941635
L
1425@kindex --no-undefined-version
1426@item --no-undefined-version
1427Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1428it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1429will be issued instead.
1430
3e3b46e5
PB
1431@kindex --default-symver
1432@item --default-symver
1433Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1434exported symbols.
1435
1436@kindex --default-imported-symver
1437@item --default-imported-symver
1438Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1439imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1440
252b5132
RH
1441@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1442@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1443Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1444files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1445been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1446This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1447errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1448have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1449inappropriate.
1450
fe7929ce
AM
1451@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1452@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1453Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1454library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1455
252b5132
RH
1456@kindex --no-whole-archive
1457@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1458Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1459archive files.
1460
1461@cindex output file after errors
1462@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1463@item --noinhibit-exec
1464Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1465Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1466errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1467when it issues any error whatsoever.
1468
0a9c1c8e
CD
1469@kindex -nostdlib
1470@item -nostdlib
1471Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1472command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1473(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1474
252b5132 1475@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1477@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1478@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1479file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1480@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1481object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1482object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1483should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1484usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1485name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1486list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1487command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1488this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1489@end ifclear
1490
36af4a4e
JJ
1491@kindex -pie
1492@kindex --pic-executable
1493@item -pie
1494@itemx --pic-executable
1495@cindex position independent executables
1496Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1497ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1498libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1499address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1500normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1501defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1502
252b5132
RH
1503@kindex -qmagic
1504@item -qmagic
1505This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1506
1507@kindex -Qy
1508@item -Qy
1509This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1510
1511@kindex --relax
1512@cindex synthesizing linker
1513@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1514@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1515An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1516@ifset GENERIC
1517This option is only supported on a few targets.
1518@end ifset
1519@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1520@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1521@end ifset
1522@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1523@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1524@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1525@ifset XTENSA
1526@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1527@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1528@ifset M68HC11
1529@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1530@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1531@ifset POWERPC
1532@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1533@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1534
1535On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1536optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1537in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1538instructions in the output object file.
1539
1540On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1541debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1542@ifset GENERIC
1543This is known to be
1544the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1545@end ifset
1546
1547@ifset GENERIC
1548On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1549but ignored.
1550@end ifset
1551
1552@cindex retaining specified symbols
1553@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1554@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1555@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1556@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1557Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1558discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1559symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1560@ifset GENERIC
1561(such as VxWorks)
1562@end ifset
1563where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1564run-time memory.
1565
1566@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1567or symbols needed for relocations.
1568
1569You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1570line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1571
1572@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1573@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1574@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1575@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1576Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1577linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1578arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1579them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1580also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1581objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1582@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1583ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1584@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1585
ff5dcc92 1586The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1587SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1588@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1589runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1590options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1591gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1592file systems.
252b5132 1593
ff5dcc92 1594For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1595followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1596the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598
1599@ifset GENERIC
1600@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1601@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1602@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1603When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1604happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1605of the input files.
1606
1607When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1608non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1609shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1610explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1611specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1612@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1613either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1614appearing multiple times.
1615
28c309a2
NC
1616This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1617that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1618is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1619runtime linker would do.
1620
252b5132 1621The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1622libraries:
252b5132
RH
1623@enumerate
1624@item
ff5dcc92 1625Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1626@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1627Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1628between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1629specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1630used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1631at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1632by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1633the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1634@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1635On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1636@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1637environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1638@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1639On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1640directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1641@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1642For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1643variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1644@item
ec4eb78a
L
1645For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1646@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1647libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1648@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1649@item
252b5132
RH
1650The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1651@item
1652For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1653exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1654@end enumerate
1655
1656If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1657warning and continue with the link.
1658@end ifset
1659
1660@kindex -shared
1661@kindex -Bshareable
1662@item -shared
1663@itemx -Bshareable
1664@cindex shared libraries
1665Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1666and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1667shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1668undefined symbols in the link.
1669
252b5132 1670@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1671@item --sort-common
1672@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1673@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1674This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1675ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1676sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1677eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1678between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1679specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1680
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex --sort-section=name
1682@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1683This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1684patterns in the linker script.
1685
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1687@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1688This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1689patterns in the linker script.
1690
252b5132 1691@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1692@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1693Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1694each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1695size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1696
1697@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1698@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1699Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1700output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1701This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1702certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1703cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1704that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1705support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1706input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1707more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1708many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1709
1710@kindex --stats
1711@item --stats
1712Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1713as execution time and memory usage.
1714
2509a395 1715@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1716@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1717Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1718configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1719that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1720
252b5132
RH
1721@kindex --traditional-format
1722@cindex traditional format
1723@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1724For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1725the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1726use the traditional format instead.
1727
1728@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1729For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1730symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1731full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1732@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1733trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1734combine duplicate entries.
1735
2509a395
SL
1736@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1737@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1738Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1739address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1740times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1741line.
1742@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1743for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1744@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1745should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1746sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1747
2509a395
SL
1748@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1749@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1750@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1751@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1752@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1753@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1754@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1755Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1756@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1757
2509a395
SL
1758@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1759@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1760@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1761When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1762of the first byte of the text segment.
1763
560e09e9
NC
1764@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1765@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1766Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1767values for @samp{method}:
1768
1769@table @samp
1770@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1771Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1772
1773@item report-all
da8bce14 1774Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1775
1776@item ignore-in-object-files
1777Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1778ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1779
1780@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1781Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1782ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1783when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1784libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1785command line.
1786@end table
1787
1788The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1789by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1790
1791Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1792unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1793can change this to a warning.
1794
252b5132
RH
1795@kindex --verbose
1796@cindex verbose
1797@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1798@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1799Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1800supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1801the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1802
1803@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1804@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1805@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1806Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1807used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1808about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1809is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1810@xref{VERSION}.
1811
7ce691ae 1812@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1813@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1814@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1815@item --warn-common
1816Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1817a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1818but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1819you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1820Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1821warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1822
1823There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1824
1825@table @samp
1826@item int i = 1;
1827A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1828file.
1829
1830@item extern int i;
1831An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1832There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1833variable somewhere.
1834
1835@item int i;
1836A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1837variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1838The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1839single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1840size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1841a definition of the same variable.
1842@end table
1843
1844The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1845Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1846just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1847encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1848a common symbol.
1849
1850@enumerate
1851@item
1852Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1853definition for the symbol.
1854@smallexample
1855@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1856 overridden by definition
1857@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1858@end smallexample
1859
1860@item
1861Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1862the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1863except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1864@smallexample
1865@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overriding common
1867@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1868@end smallexample
1869
1870@item
1871Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1872@smallexample
1873@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1874 of `@var{symbol}'
1875@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1876@end smallexample
1877
1878@item
1879Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1880@smallexample
1881@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1882 overridden by larger common
1883@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1884@end smallexample
1885
1886@item
1887Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1888the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1889encountered in a different order.
1890@smallexample
1891@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1892 overriding smaller common
1893@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1894@end smallexample
1895@end enumerate
1896
1897@kindex --warn-constructors
1898@item --warn-constructors
1899Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1900object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1901detect the use of global constructors.
1902
1903@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1904@item --warn-multiple-gp
1905Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1906This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1907Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1908section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1909of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1910base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1911base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1912bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1913large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1914values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1915option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1916
1917@kindex --warn-once
1918@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1919@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1920@item --warn-once
1921Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1922which refers to it.
1923
1924@kindex --warn-section-align
1925@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1926@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1927@item --warn-section-align
1928Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1929alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1930The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1931is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1932the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1933
8fdd7217
NC
1934@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1935@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1936Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1937
560e09e9
NC
1938@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1939@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1940If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1941@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1942This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1943
1944@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1945@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1946This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1947it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1948
252b5132
RH
1949@kindex --whole-archive
1950@cindex including an entire archive
1951@item --whole-archive
1952For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1953@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1954in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1955files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1956library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1957library. This option may be used more than once.
1958
7ec229ce 1959Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1960about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1961Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1962list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1963your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1964
2509a395
SL
1965@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1966@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1967Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1968@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1969undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1970@var{symbol}.
1971
1972This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1973wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1974wishes to call the system function, it should call
1975@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1976
1977Here is a trivial example:
1978
1979@smallexample
1980void *
cc2f008e 1981__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1982@{
cc2f008e 1983 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1984 return __real_malloc (c);
1985@}
1986@end smallexample
1987
ff5dcc92 1988If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1989all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1990instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1991call the real @code{malloc} function.
1992
1993You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1994links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1995you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1996file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1997call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1998
6aa29e7b
JJ
1999@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2000@item --eh-frame-hdr
2001Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2002@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2003
6c1439be
L
2004@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2005@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2006@item --enable-new-dtags
2007@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2008This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2009systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2010@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2011If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2012created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2013those options are only available for ELF systems.
2014
2d643429 2015@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2016@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2017Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2018close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2019time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2020increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2021value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2022
fdc90cb4
JJ
2023@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2024@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2025Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2026@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2027new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2028the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2029hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2030
35835446
JR
2031@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2032@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2033This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2034linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2035for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2036about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2037
4f9c04f7 2038Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20391021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2040run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2041has been used.
2042
2043The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2044enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2045
c0065db7
RM
2046@kindex --build-id
2047@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2048@item --build-id
2049@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2050Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2051The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2052file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2053@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2054parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2055@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2056@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2057an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2058characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2059omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2060
2061The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2062that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2063unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2064to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2065file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2066string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2067
2068Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2069@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2070@end table
2071
0285c67d
NC
2072@c man end
2073
36f63dca 2074@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2075
0285c67d
NC
2076@c man begin OPTIONS
2077
ff5dcc92 2078The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2079the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2080normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2081use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2082@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2083like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2084symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2085object file).
2086
2087In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2088support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2089PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2090values by either a space or an equals sign.
2091
ff5dcc92 2092@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2095@item --add-stdcall-alias
2096If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2097as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2098[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2099
2100@kindex --base-file
2101@item --base-file @var{file}
2102Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2103addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2104@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2105[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --dll
2108@item --dll
2109Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2110@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2111file.
bb10df36 2112[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2113
88183869
DK
2114@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2115@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2116@item --enable-long-section-names
2117@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2118The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2119the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2120for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2121fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2122to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2123allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2124disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2125generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2126as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2127with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2128GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2129information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2130option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2131section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2132when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2133image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2134[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2135
252b5132
RH
2136@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2137@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2138@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2139@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2140If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2141do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2142only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2143resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2144undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2145@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2146to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2147warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2148import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2149to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2150feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2151@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2152mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2153[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2154
2155@cindex DLLs, creating
2156@kindex --export-all-symbols
2157@item --export-all-symbols
2158If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2159be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2160otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2161explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2162attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2163option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2164@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2165@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2166exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2167re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2168such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2169@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2170@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2171Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2172not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2173extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2174(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2175These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2176@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2177@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2178@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2179@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2183@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2184Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2185exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2186[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2187
2188@kindex --file-alignment
2189@item --file-alignment
2190Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2191file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2192512.
bb10df36 2193[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2194
2195@cindex heap size
2196@kindex --heap
2197@item --heap @var{reserve}
2198@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2199Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2200to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2201committed.
bb10df36 2202[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2203
2204@cindex image base
2205@kindex --image-base
2206@item --image-base @var{value}
2207Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2208the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2209is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2210your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2211other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2212for dlls.
bb10df36 2213[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2214
2215@kindex --kill-at
2216@item --kill-at
2217If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2218symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2220
26d2d8a2
BF
2221@kindex --large-address-aware
2222@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2223If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2224header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2225greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2226or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2227section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2228[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2229
252b5132
RH
2230@kindex --major-image-version
2231@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2232Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2233[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2234
2235@kindex --major-os-version
2236@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2237Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2238[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2239
2240@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2241@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2242Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2243[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2244
2245@kindex --minor-image-version
2246@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2247Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2248[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2249
2250@kindex --minor-os-version
2251@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2252Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2254
2255@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2256@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2257Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2259
2260@cindex DEF files, creating
2261@cindex DLLs, creating
2262@kindex --output-def
2263@item --output-def @var{file}
2264The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2265file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2266(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2267library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2268automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2269[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2270
b044cda1
CW
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --out-implib
2273@item --out-implib @var{file}
2274The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2275import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2276import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2277may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2278makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2279creation step.
bb10df36 2280[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2281
2282@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2283@item --enable-auto-image-base
2284Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2285using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2286from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2287collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2288avoided.
bb10df36 2289[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2290
2291@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2292@item --disable-auto-image-base
2293Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2294user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2295default.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2297
2298@cindex DLLs, linking to
2299@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2300@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2301When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2302search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2303@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2304between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2305uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2306@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2308
2309@kindex --enable-auto-import
2310@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2311Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2312DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2313building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2314'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2315to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2316specification published by Microsoft.
2317
e2a83dd0
NC
2318Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2319data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2320placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2321around a problem with consts that is described here:
2322http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2323
4d8907ac
DS
2324Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2325see this message:
0d888aac 2326
ece2d90e 2327"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2328documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2329
ece2d90e
NC
2330This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2331ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2332allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2333fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2334constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2335multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2336this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2337of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2338the warning, and exit.
2339
2340There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2341data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2342
2fa9fc65
NC
2343One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2344of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2345this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2346
c0065db7
RM
2347A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2348that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2349there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2350a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2351
2352@example
2353extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2354extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2355 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2356@end example
2357
2358or
2359
2360@example
2361extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2362extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2363 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2364@end example
2365
c0065db7 2366For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2367is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2368
2369@example
2370extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2371extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2372 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2373@end example
2374
c406afaf
NC
2375or
2376
2377@example
2378extern long long extern_ll;
2379extern_ll -->
2380 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2381@end example
2382
2fa9fc65 2383A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2384'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2385@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2386requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2387building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2388merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2389between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2390constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2391
2392Original:
2393@example
2394--foo.h
2395extern int arr[];
2396--foo.c
2397#include "foo.h"
2398void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2399 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2400@}
2401@end example
2402
2403Solution 1:
2404@example
2405--foo.h
2406extern int arr[];
2407--foo.c
2408#include "foo.h"
2409void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2410 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2411 volatile int *parr = arr;
2412 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2413@}
2414@end example
2415
2416Solution 2:
2417@example
2418--foo.h
2419/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2420#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2421 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2422#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2423#else
2424#define FOO_IMPORT
2425#endif
2426extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2427--foo.c
2428#include "foo.h"
2429void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2430 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2431@}
2432@end example
2433
c0065db7 2434A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2435library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2436for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2437functions).
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2439
2440@kindex --disable-auto-import
2441@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2442Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2443@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2444[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2445
2fa9fc65
NC
2446@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2447@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2448If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2449that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2450a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2451environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2452[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2453
2454@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2455@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2456Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2457DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2458[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2459
b044cda1
CW
2460@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2461@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2462Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2464
252b5132
RH
2465@kindex --section-alignment
2466@item --section-alignment
2467Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2468addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2469[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2470
2471@cindex stack size
2472@kindex --stack
2473@item --stack @var{reserve}
2474@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2475Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2476to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2477committed.
bb10df36 2478[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2479
2480@kindex --subsystem
2481@item --subsystem @var{which}
2482@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2483@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2484Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2485legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2486@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2487the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2488@var{which}.
bb10df36 2489[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2490
2491@end table
2492
0285c67d
NC
2493@c man end
2494
93fd0973
SC
2495@ifset M68HC11
2496@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2497
2498@c man begin OPTIONS
2499
2500The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2501memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2502
2503@table @gcctabopt
2504
2505@kindex --no-trampoline
2506@item --no-trampoline
2507This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2508is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2509instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2510
2511@kindex --bank-window
2512@item --bank-window @var{name}
2513This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2514the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2515The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2516paging and addresses within the memory window.
2517
2518@end table
2519
2520@c man end
2521@end ifset
2522
7fb9f789
NC
2523@ifset M68K
2524@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2525
2526@c man begin OPTIONS
2527
2528The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2529when linking for 68K targets.
2530
2531@table @gcctabopt
2532
2533@kindex --got
2534@item --got=@var{type}
2535This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2536@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2537@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2538Info entry for @file{ld}.
2539
2540@end table
2541
2542@c man end
2543@end ifset
2544
252b5132
RH
2545@ifset UsesEnvVars
2546@node Environment
2547@section Environment Variables
2548
0285c67d
NC
2549@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2550
560e09e9 2551You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2552@ifclear SingleFormat
2553@code{GNUTARGET},
2554@end ifclear
2555@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2556
36f63dca 2557@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2558@kindex GNUTARGET
2559@cindex default input format
2560@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2561use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2562of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2563@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2564of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2565attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2566this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2567there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2568object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2569BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2570in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2571@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2572
2573@kindex LDEMULATION
2574@cindex default emulation
2575@cindex emulation, default
2576@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2577@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2578behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2579available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2580the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2581variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2582linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2585@cindex demangling, default
2586Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2587@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2588default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2589a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2590may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2591options.
2592
0285c67d
NC
2593@c man end
2594@end ifset
2595
252b5132
RH
2596@node Scripts
2597@chapter Linker Scripts
2598
2599@cindex scripts
2600@cindex linker scripts
2601@cindex command files
2602Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2603written in the linker command language.
2604
2605The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2606the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2607the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2608more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2609direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2610described below.
2611
2612The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2613yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2614linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2615to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2616such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2617
2618You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2619line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2620default linker script.
2621
2622You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2623to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2624Linker Scripts}.
2625
2626@menu
2627* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2628* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2629* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2630* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2631* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2632* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2633* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2634* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2635* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2636* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2637* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2638@end menu
2639
2640@node Basic Script Concepts
2641@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2642@cindex linker script concepts
2643We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2644describe the linker script language.
2645
2646The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2647file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2648@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2649The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2650purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2651among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2652section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2653in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2654
2655Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2656also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2657contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2658the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2659A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2660area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2661loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2662which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2663of debugging information.
2664
2665Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2666first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2667the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2668@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2669section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2670same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2671is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2672(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2673based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2674RAM address would be the VMA.
2675
2676You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2677program with the @samp{-h} option.
2678
2679Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2680@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2681has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2682information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2683will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2684static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2685referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2686
2687You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2688program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2689option.
2690
2691@node Script Format
2692@section Linker Script Format
2693@cindex linker script format
2694Linker scripts are text files.
2695
2696You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2697either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2698symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2699generally ignored.
2700
2701Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2702If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2703otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2704double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2705file name.
2706
2707You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2708@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2709to whitespace.
2710
2711@node Simple Example
2712@section Simple Linker Script Example
2713@cindex linker script example
2714@cindex example of linker script
2715Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2716
2717The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2718@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2719memory layout of the output file.
2720
2721The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2722describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2723code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2724@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2725Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2726your input files.
2727
2728For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27290x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2730linker script which will do that:
2731@smallexample
2732SECTIONS
2733@{
2734 . = 0x10000;
2735 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2736 . = 0x8000000;
2737 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2738 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2739@}
2740@end smallexample
2741
2742You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2743followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2744descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2745
252b5132
RH
2746The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2747sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2748counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2749other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2750current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2751incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2752@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2753
2754The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2755required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2756after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2757which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2758wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2759means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2760
2761Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2762@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2763@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2764
2765The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2766the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2767at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2768output section, the value of the location counter will be
2769@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2770effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2771immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2772
2773The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2774alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2775example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2776sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2777may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2778sections.
2779
2780That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2781
2782@node Simple Commands
2783@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2784@cindex linker script simple commands
2785In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2786
2787@menu
2788* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2789* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2790@ifclear SingleFormat
2791* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2792@end ifclear
2793
4a93e180 2794* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2795* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2796@end menu
2797
2798@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2799@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2800@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2801@cindex start of execution
2802@cindex first instruction
2803@cindex entry point
2804The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2805point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2806entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2807@smallexample
2808ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2809@end smallexample
2810
2811There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2812entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2813stopping when one of them succeeds:
2814@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2815@item
252b5132 2816the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2817@item
252b5132 2818the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2819@item
252b5132 2820the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2821@item
252b5132 2822the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2823@item
252b5132
RH
2824The address @code{0}.
2825@end itemize
2826
2827@node File Commands
36f63dca 2828@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2829@cindex linker script file commands
2830Several linker script commands deal with files.
2831
2832@table @code
2833@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2834@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2835@cindex including a linker script
2836Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2837be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2838with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
283910 levels deep.
2840
4006703d
NS
2841You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2842@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2843
252b5132
RH
2844@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2845@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2846@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2847@cindex input files in linker scripts
2848@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2849@cindex linker script input object files
2850The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2851in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2852
2853For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2854a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2855then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2856
2857In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2858script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2859
e3f2db7f
AO
2860In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2861with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2862located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2863for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2864open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2865linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2866description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2867
ff5dcc92 2868If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2869name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2870@samp{-l}.
2871
2872When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2873files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2874script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2875
2876@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2877@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2878@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2879@cindex grouping input files
2880The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2881files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2882new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2883in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2884
b717d30e
JJ
2885@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2886@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2887@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2888This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2889commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2890as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2891with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2892when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2893@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2894and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2895setting afterwards.
2896
252b5132
RH
2897@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2898@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2899@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2900The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2901@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2902@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2903Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2904precedence.
2905
2906You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2907output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2908
2909@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2910@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2911@cindex library search path in linker script
2912@cindex archive search path in linker script
2913@cindex search path in linker script
2914The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2915@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2916@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2917on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2918are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2919the command line option are searched first.
2920
2921@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2922@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2923@cindex first input file
2924The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2925that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2926though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2927when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2928first file.
2929@end table
2930
2931@ifclear SingleFormat
2932@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2933@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2934A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2935
2936@table @code
2937@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2938@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2939@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2940@cindex output file format in linker script
2941The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2942output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2943exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2944(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2945line option takes precedence.
2946
2947You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2948formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2949This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2950desired endianness.
2951
2952If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2953will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2954output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2955used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2956
2957For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2958command:
2959@smallexample
2960OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2961@end smallexample
2962This says that the default format for the output file is
2963@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2964option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2965format.
2966
2967@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2968@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2969@cindex input file format in linker script
2970The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2971files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2972This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2973(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2974is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2975command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2976@end table
2977@end ifclear
2978
4a93e180
NC
2979@node REGION_ALIAS
2980@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
2981@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2982@cindex region alias
2983@cindex region names
2984
2985Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
2986@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
2987
2988@smallexample
2989REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2990@end smallexample
2991
2992The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
2993memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
2994to memory regions. An example follows.
2995
2996Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
2997memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
2998that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
2999non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3000access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3001read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3002sections:
3003
3004@itemize @bullet
3005@item
3006@code{.text} program code;
3007@item
3008@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3009@item
3010@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3011@item
3012@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3013@end itemize
3014
3015The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3016part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3017output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3018systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3019@code{C}:
3020@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3021@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3022@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3023@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3024@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3025@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3026@end multitable
3027The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3028loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3029the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3030the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3031
3032The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3033includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3034memory layout:
3035@smallexample
3036INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3037
3038SECTIONS
3039 @{
3040 .text :
3041 @{
3042 *(.text)
3043 @} > REGION_TEXT
3044 .rodata :
3045 @{
3046 *(.rodata)
3047 rodata_end = .;
3048 @} > REGION_RODATA
3049 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3050 @{
3051 data_start = .;
3052 *(.data)
3053 @} > REGION_DATA
3054 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3055 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3056 .bss :
3057 @{
3058 *(.bss)
3059 @} > REGION_BSS
3060 @}
3061@end smallexample
3062
3063Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3064regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3065variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3066@table @code
3067@item A
3068Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3069@smallexample
3070MEMORY
3071 @{
3072 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3073 @}
3074
3075REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3076REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3077REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3078REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3079@end smallexample
3080@item B
3081Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3082into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3083@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3084@smallexample
3085MEMORY
3086 @{
3087 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3088 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3089 @}
3090
3091REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3092REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3093REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3094REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3095@end smallexample
3096@item C
3097Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3098@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3099initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3100system start into the @code{RAM}.
3101@smallexample
3102MEMORY
3103 @{
3104 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3105 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3106 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3107 @}
3108
3109REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3110REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3111REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3112REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3113@end smallexample
3114@end table
3115
3116It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3117@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3118necessary:
3119@smallexample
3120#include <string.h>
3121
3122extern char data_start [];
3123extern char data_size [];
3124extern char data_load_start [];
3125
3126void copy_data(void)
3127@{
3128 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3129 @{
3130 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3131 @}
3132@}
3133@end smallexample
3134
252b5132 3135@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3136@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3137There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3138
3139@table @code
3140@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3141@kindex ASSERT
3142@cindex assertion in linker script
3143Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3144with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3145
3146@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3147@kindex EXTERN
3148@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3149Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3150symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3151modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3152each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3153command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3154
3155@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3156@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3157@cindex common allocation in linker script
3158This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3159to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3160output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3161
4818e05f
AM
3162@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3163@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3164@cindex common allocation in linker script
3165This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3166command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3167to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3168
53d25da6
AM
3169@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3170@kindex INSERT
3171@cindex insert user script into default script
3172This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3173augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3174inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3175@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3176default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3177sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3178linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3179insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3180linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3181default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3182of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3183to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3184is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3185
3186@smallexample
3187SECTIONS
3188@{
3189 OVERLAY :
3190 @{
3191 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3192 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3193 @}
3194@}
3195INSERT AFTER .text;
3196@end smallexample
3197
252b5132
RH
3198@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3199@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3200@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3201This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3202references among certain output sections.
3203
3204In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3205using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3206will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3207errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3208a function defined in the other section.
3209
3210The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3211@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3212an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3213@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3214names.
3215
3216@ifclear SingleFormat
3217@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3218@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3219@cindex machine architecture
3220@cindex architecture
3221Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3222of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3223architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3224the @samp{-f} option.
3225@end ifclear
3226@end table
3227
3228@node Assignments
3229@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3230@cindex assignment in scripts
3231@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3232@cindex variables, defining
3233You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3234the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3235
3236@menu
3237* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3238* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3239* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3240* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3241@end menu
3242
3243@node Simple Assignments
3244@subsection Simple Assignments
3245
3246You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3247
3248@table @code
3249@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3250@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3251@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3252@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3253@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3254@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3255@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3256@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3257@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3258@end table
3259
3260The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3261@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3262defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3263
3264The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3265may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3266
3267The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3268
3269Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3270
3271You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3272statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3273section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3274
3275The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3276expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3277
3278Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3279assignments may be used:
3280
3281@smallexample
3282floating_point = 0;
3283SECTIONS
3284@{
3285 .text :
3286 @{
3287 *(.text)
3288 _etext = .;
3289 @}
156e34dd 3290 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3291 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3292@}
3293@end smallexample
3294@noindent
3295In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3296zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3297the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3298defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3299upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3300
3301@node PROVIDE
3302@subsection PROVIDE
3303@cindex PROVIDE
3304In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3305only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3306the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3307@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3308@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3309@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3310@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3311@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3312
3313Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3314@smallexample
3315SECTIONS
3316@{
3317 .text :
3318 @{
3319 *(.text)
3320 _etext = .;
3321 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3322 @}
3323@}
3324@end smallexample
3325
3326In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3327underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3328the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3329underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3330If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3331linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3332
7af8e998
L
3333@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3334@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3335@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3336Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3337hidden and won't be exported.
3338
73ae6183
NC
3339@node Source Code Reference
3340@subsection Source Code Reference
3341
3342Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3343intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3344a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3345symbol that does not have a value.
3346
3347Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3348transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3349stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3350prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3351mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3352of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3353variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3354linker script variable might be referred to as:
3355
3356@smallexample
3357 extern int foo;
3358@end smallexample
3359
3360But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3361
3362@smallexample
3363 _foo = 1000;
3364@end smallexample
3365
3366In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3367transformation has taken place.
3368
3369When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3370things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3371in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3372second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3373table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3374contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3375value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3376
3377@smallexample
3378 int foo = 1000;
3379@end smallexample
3380
3381creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3382holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3383number 1000 is initially stored.
3384
3385When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3386first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3387memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3388So:
3389
3390@smallexample
3391 foo = 1;
3392@end smallexample
3393
3394looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3395associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3396address. Whereas:
3397
3398@smallexample
3399 int * a = & foo;
3400@end smallexample
3401
3402looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3403and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3404the variable @samp{a}.
3405
3406Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3407the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3408an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3409
3410@smallexample
3411 foo = 1000;
3412@end smallexample
3413
3414creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3415the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3416address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3417linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3418access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3419
3420Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3421you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3422use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3423section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3424linker script contains these declarations:
3425
3426@smallexample
3427@group
3428 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3429 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3430 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3431@end group
3432@end smallexample
3433
3434Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3435
3436@smallexample
3437@group
3438 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3439
73ae6183
NC
3440 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3441@end group
3442@end smallexample
3443
3444Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3445
252b5132 3446@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3447@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3448@kindex SECTIONS
3449The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3450into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3451
3452The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3453@smallexample
3454SECTIONS
3455@{
3456 @var{sections-command}
3457 @var{sections-command}
3458 @dots{}
3459@}
3460@end smallexample
3461
3462Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3463
3464@itemize @bullet
3465@item
3466an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3467@item
3468a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3469@item
3470an output section description
3471@item
3472an overlay description
3473@end itemize
3474
3475The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3476@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3477those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3478understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3479the layout of the output file.
3480
3481Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3482below.
3483
3484If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3485linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3486section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3487input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3488example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3489in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3490
3491@menu
3492* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3493* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3494* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3495* Input Section:: Input section description
3496* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3497* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3498* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3499* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3500* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3501@end menu
3502
3503@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3504@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3505The full description of an output section looks like this:
3506@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3507@group
7e7d5768 3508@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3509 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3510 @{
3511 @var{output-section-command}
3512 @var{output-section-command}
3513 @dots{}
562d3460 3514 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3515@end group
3516@end smallexample
3517
3518Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3519
3520The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3521name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3522The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3523
3524Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3525
3526@itemize @bullet
3527@item
3528a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3529@item
3530an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3531@item
3532data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3533@item
3534a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3535@end itemize
3536
3537@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3538@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3539@cindex name, section
3540@cindex section name
3541The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3542meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3543support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3544must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3545example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3546output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3547names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3548quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3549characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3550commas must be quoted.
3551
3552The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3553Discarding}.
3554
3555@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3556@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3557@cindex address, section
3558@cindex section address
3559The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3560address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3561the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3562based on the current value of the location counter.
3563
3564If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3565set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3566@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3567current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3568requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3569output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3570within the output section.
3571
3572For example,
3573@smallexample
3574.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3575@end smallexample
3576@noindent
3577and
3578@smallexample
3579.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3580@end smallexample
3581@noindent
3582are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3583@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3584counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3585counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3586section.
3587
3588The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3589For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3590so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3591do something like this:
3592@smallexample
3593.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3594@end smallexample
3595@noindent
3596This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3597aligned upward to the specified value.
3598
3599Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3600location counter.
3601
3602@node Input Section
36f63dca 3603@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3604@cindex input sections
3605@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3606The most common output section command is an input section description.
3607
3608The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3609You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3610in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3611map the input files into your memory layout.
3612
3613@menu
3614* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3615* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3616* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3617* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3618* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3619@end menu
3620
3621@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3622@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3623@cindex input section basics
3624An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3625by a list of section names in parentheses.
3626
3627The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3628describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3629
3630The most common input section description is to include all input
3631sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3632include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3633@smallexample
3634*(.text)
3635@end smallexample
3636@noindent
18625d54
CM
3637Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3638of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3639match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3640example:
252b5132 3641@smallexample
b4346c09 3642*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3643@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3644will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3645@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3646
3647There are two ways to include more than one section:
3648@smallexample
3649*(.text .rdata)
3650*(.text) *(.rdata)
3651@end smallexample
3652@noindent
3653The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3654@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3655first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3656they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3657@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3658@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3659
3660You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3661You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3662needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3663@smallexample
3664data.o(.data)
3665@end smallexample
3666
967928e9
AM
3667You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3668matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3669with no whitespace around the colon.
3670
3671@table @samp
3672@item archive:file
3673matches file within archive
3674@item archive:
3675matches the whole archive
3676@item :file
3677matches file but not one in an archive
3678@end table
3679
3680Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3681wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3682single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3683@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3684within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3685also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3686other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3687from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3688command.
3689
252b5132
RH
3690If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3691the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3692commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3693@smallexample
3694data.o
3695@end smallexample
3696
967928e9
AM
3697When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3698and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3699characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3700name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3701did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3702though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3703@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3704the archive search path.
3705
3706@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3707@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3708@cindex input section wildcards
3709@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3710@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3711@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3712In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3713name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3714
3715The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3716pattern for the file name.
3717
3718The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3719
3720@table @samp
3721@item *
3722matches any number of characters
3723@item ?
3724matches any single character
3725@item [@var{chars}]
3726matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3727character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3728@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3729@item \
3730quotes the following character
3731@end table
3732
3733When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3734will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3735Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3736exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3737@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3738a @samp{/} character.
3739
3740File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3741specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3742does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3743
3744If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3745appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3746will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3747sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3748@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3749@smallexample
3750.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3751.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3752@end smallexample
3753
bcaa7b3e 3754@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3755Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3756in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3757this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3758pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3759@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3760into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3761
bcaa7b3e
L
3762@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3763@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3764difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3765ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3766
3767@cindex SORT
3768@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3769
3770When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3771can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3772
3773@enumerate
3774@item
3775@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3776It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3777sections have the same name.
3778@item
3779@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3780It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3781sections have the same alignment.
3782@item
c0065db7 3783@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3784treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3785@item
3786@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3787is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3788@item
3789All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3790@end enumerate
3791
3792When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3793section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3794takes precedence over the command line option.
3795
3796If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3797command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3798treated as nested sorting command.
3799
3800@enumerate
3801@item
3802@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3803@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3804@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3805@item
3806@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3807@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3808@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3809@end enumerate
3810
3811If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3812command line option will be ignored.
3813
252b5132
RH
3814If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3815@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3816precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3817
3818This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3819files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3820sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3821The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3822with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3823linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3824@smallexample
3825@group
3826SECTIONS @{
3827 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3828 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3829 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3830 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3831@}
3832@end group
3833@end smallexample
3834
3835@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3836@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3837@cindex common symbol placement
3838@cindex uninitialized data placement
3839A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3840file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3841linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3842named @samp{COMMON}.
3843
3844You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3845other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3846particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3847input files are placed in another section.
3848
3849In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3850@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3851@smallexample
3852.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3853@end smallexample
3854
3855@cindex scommon section
3856@cindex small common symbols
3857Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3858example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3859symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3860different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3861the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3862symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3863to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3864locations.
3865
3866@cindex [COMMON]
3867You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3868notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3869@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3870
3871@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3872@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3873@cindex KEEP
3874@cindex garbage collection
3875When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3876it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3877This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3878with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3879@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3880
3881@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3882@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3883The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3884to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3885start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3886@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3887follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3888@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3889@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3890All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3891files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3892
3893@smallexample
3894@group
3895SECTIONS @{
3896 outputa 0x10000 :
3897 @{
3898 all.o
3899 foo.o (.input1)
3900 @}
36f63dca
NC
3901@end group
3902@group
252b5132
RH
3903 outputb :
3904 @{
3905 foo.o (.input2)
3906 foo1.o (.input1)
3907 @}
36f63dca
NC
3908@end group
3909@group
252b5132
RH
3910 outputc :
3911 @{
3912 *(.input1)
3913 *(.input2)
3914 @}
3915@}
3916@end group
a1ab1d2a 3917@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3918
3919@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3920@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3921@cindex data
3922@cindex section data
3923@cindex output section data
3924@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3925@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3926@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3927@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3928@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3929You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3930@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3931an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3932parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3933value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3934counter.
3935
3936The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3937store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3938bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3939stored.
3940
3941For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3942of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3943@smallexample
3944BYTE(1)
3945LONG(addr)
3946@end smallexample
3947
3948When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3949same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3950target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3951@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3952@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3953
3954If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3955which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3956When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3957true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3958endianness of the first input object file.
3959
36f63dca 3960Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3961between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3962@smallexample
3963SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3964@end smallexample
3965whereas this will work:
3966@smallexample
3967SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3968@end smallexample
3969
252b5132
RH
3970@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3971@cindex holes, filling
3972@cindex unspecified memory
3973You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3974current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3975otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3976gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3977with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3978necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3979point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3980than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3981different parts of an output section.
3982
3983This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3984value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3985@smallexample
563e308f 3986FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3987@end smallexample
3988
3989The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3990section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3991part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3992entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3993precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3994expression.
252b5132
RH
3995
3996@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3997@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3998There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3999commands.
4000
4001@table @code
4002@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4003@cindex input filename symbols
4004@cindex filename symbols
4005@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4006The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4007The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4008file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4009the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4010
4011This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4012normally used for any other object file format.
4013
4014@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4015@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4016@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4017@item CONSTRUCTORS
4018When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4019unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4020destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4021arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4022automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4023For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4024linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4025@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4026ignored for other object file formats.
4027
4028The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4029constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4030Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4031the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4032first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4033of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4034compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4035formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4036@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4037the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4038destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4039@code{exit}.
4040
4041For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4042arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4043addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4044and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4045linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4046runtime code expects to see.
4047
4048@smallexample
4049 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4050 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4051 *(.ctors)
4052 LONG(0)
4053 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4054 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4055 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4056 *(.dtors)
4057 LONG(0)
4058 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4059@end smallexample
4060
4061If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4062which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4063are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4064are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4065command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4066@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4067@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4068@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4069
4070Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4071and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4072need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4073scripts.
4074
4075@end table
4076
4077@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4078@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4079@cindex discarding sections
4080@cindex sections, discarding
4081@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4082The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4083for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4084be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4085@smallexample
49c13adb 4086.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4087@end smallexample
4088@noindent
4089will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4090@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4091sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4092space in an output section will also create the output section.
4093
a0976ea4 4094The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4095on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4096symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4097the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4098section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4099
4100@cindex /DISCARD/
4101The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4102input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4103section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4104
4105@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4106@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4107@cindex output section attributes
4108We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4109like this:
4110@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4111@group
7e7d5768 4112@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 4113 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
4114 @{
4115 @var{output-section-command}
4116 @var{output-section-command}
4117 @dots{}
562d3460 4118 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4119@end group
4120@end smallexample
4121We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4122@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4123remaining section attributes.
4124
a1ab1d2a 4125@menu
252b5132
RH
4126* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4127* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4128* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4129* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
4130* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4131* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4132* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4133@end menu
4134
4135@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4136@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4137Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4138parentheses. The following types are defined:
4139
4140@table @code
4141@item NOLOAD
4142The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4143loaded into memory when the program is run.
4144@item DSECT
4145@itemx COPY
4146@itemx INFO
4147@itemx OVERLAY
4148These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4149rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4150marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4151section when the program is run.
4152@end table
4153
4154@kindex NOLOAD
4155@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4156@cindex loading, preventing
4157The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4158the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4159the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4160@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4161need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4162@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4163@smallexample
4164@group
4165SECTIONS @{
4166 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4167 @dots{}
4168@}
4169@end group
4170@end smallexample
4171
4172@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4173@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4174@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4175@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4176@cindex load address
4177@cindex section load address
4178Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4179@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4180an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4181Address}).
4182
dc0b6aa0
AM
4183The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4184the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4185
4186Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4187specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4188Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4189linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4190
4191If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4192section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4193VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4194section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4195or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4196to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4197@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4198
4199@cindex ROM initialized data
4200@cindex initialized data in ROM
4201This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4202example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4203called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4204@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4205even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4206uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4207defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4208counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4209
4210@smallexample
4211@group
4212SECTIONS
4213 @{
4214 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4215 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4216 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4217 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4218 .bss 0x3000 :
4219 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4220@}
4221@end group
4222@end smallexample
4223
4224The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4225this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4226the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4227how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4228script.
4229
4230@smallexample
4231@group
4232extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4233char *src = &_etext;
4234char *dst = &_data;
4235
4236/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4237while (dst < &_edata) @{
4238 *dst++ = *src++;
4239@}
4240
4241/* Zero bss */
4242for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4243 *dst = 0;
4244@end group
4245@end smallexample
4246
bbf115d3
L
4247@node Forced Output Alignment
4248@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4249@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4250@cindex forcing output section alignment
4251@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4252You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4253
7e7d5768
AM
4254@node Forced Input Alignment
4255@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4256@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4257@cindex forcing input section alignment
4258@cindex input section alignment
4259You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4260SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4261sections, whether larger or smaller.
4262
252b5132 4263@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4264@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4265@kindex >@var{region}
4266@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4267@cindex memory regions and sections
4268You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4269using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4270
4271Here is a simple example:
4272@smallexample
4273@group
4274MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4275SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4276@end group
4277@end smallexample
4278
4279@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4280@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4281@kindex :@var{phdr}
4282@cindex section, assigning to program header
4283@cindex program headers and sections
4284You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4285using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4286one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4287assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4288@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4289linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4290
4291Here is a simple example:
4292@smallexample
4293@group
4294PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4295SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4296@end group
4297@end smallexample
4298
4299@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4300@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4301@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4302@cindex section fill pattern
4303@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4304You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4305@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4306(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4307within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4308alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4309necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4310of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4311an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4312fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4313other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4314pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4315expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4316
4317You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4318output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4319
4320Here is a simple example:
4321@smallexample
4322@group
563e308f 4323SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4324@end group
4325@end smallexample
4326
4327@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4328@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4329@kindex OVERLAY
4330@cindex overlays
4331An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4332are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4333the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4334copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4335required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4336can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4337than another.
4338
4339Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4340@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4341output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4342command is as follows:
4343@smallexample
4344@group
4345OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4346 @{
4347 @var{secname1}
4348 @{
4349 @var{output-section-command}
4350 @var{output-section-command}
4351 @dots{}
4352 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4353 @var{secname2}
4354 @{
4355 @var{output-section-command}
4356 @var{output-section-command}
4357 @dots{}
4358 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4359 @dots{}
4360 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4361@end group
4362@end smallexample
4363
4364Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4365section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4366section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4367those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4368except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4369sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4370
4371The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4372addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4373memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4374whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4375and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4376and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4377
4378If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4379among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4380all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4381section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4382NOCROSSREFS}.
4383
4384For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4385provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4386defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4387@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4388the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4389within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4390symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4391
4392At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4393the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4394
4395Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4396@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4397@smallexample
4398@group
4399 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4400 @{
4401 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4402 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4403 @}
4404@end group
4405@end smallexample
4406@noindent
4407This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4408address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4409@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4410following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4411@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4412@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4413
4414C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4415like the following.
4416
4417@smallexample
4418@group
4419 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4420 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4421 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4422@end group
4423@end smallexample
4424
4425Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4426everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4427example could have been written identically as follows.
4428
4429@smallexample
4430@group
4431 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4432 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4433 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4434 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4435 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4436 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4437 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4438@end group
4439@end smallexample
4440
4441@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4442@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4443@kindex MEMORY
4444@cindex memory regions
4445@cindex regions of memory
4446@cindex allocating memory
4447@cindex discontinuous memory
4448The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4449memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4450
4451The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4452memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4453may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4454can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4455set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4456regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4457around to fit into the available regions.
4458
4459A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4460command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4461you wish. The syntax is:
4462@smallexample
4463@group
a1ab1d2a 4464MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4465 @{
4466 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4467 @dots{}
4468 @}
4469@end group
4470@end smallexample
4471
4472The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4473region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4474Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4475with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4476must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4477add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4478command.
252b5132
RH
4479
4480@cindex memory region attributes
4481The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4482whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4483not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4484@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4485section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4486the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4487them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4488
4489The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4490@table @samp
4491@item R
4492Read-only section
4493@item W
4494Read/write section
4495@item X
4496Executable section
4497@item A
4498Allocatable section
4499@item I
4500Initialized section
4501@item L
4502Same as @samp{I}
4503@item !
4504Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4505@end table
4506
4507If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4508@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4509attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4510in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4511attributes.
4512
4513@kindex ORIGIN =
4514@kindex o =
4515@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4516The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4517the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4518cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4519abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4520@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4521
4522@kindex LENGTH =
4523@kindex len =
4524@kindex l =
4525The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4526region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4527be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4528@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4529
4530In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4531available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4532and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4533linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4534is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4535or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4536explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4537region.
4538
4539@smallexample
4540@group
a1ab1d2a 4541MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4542 @{
4543 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4544 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4545 @}
4546@end group
4547@end smallexample
4548
4549Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4550specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4551@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4552a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4553output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4554was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4555the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4556output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4557region, the linker will issue an error message.
4558
3ec57632 4559It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4560expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4561@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4562
4563@smallexample
4564@group
c0065db7 4565 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4566@end group
4567@end smallexample
4568
252b5132
RH
4569@node PHDRS
4570@section PHDRS Command
4571@kindex PHDRS
4572@cindex program headers
4573@cindex ELF program headers
4574@cindex program segments
4575@cindex segments, ELF
4576The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4577@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4578loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4579program with the @samp{-p} option.
4580
4581When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4582reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4583program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4584This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4585interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4586
4587The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4588in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4589precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4590the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4591not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4592
4593The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4594generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4595ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4596
4597This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4598@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4599
4600@smallexample
4601@group
4602PHDRS
4603@{
4604 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4605 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4606@}
4607@end group
4608@end smallexample
4609
4610The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4611of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4612header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4613with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4614must have a distinct name.
4615
4616Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4617system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4618specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4619sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4620attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4621Section Phdr}.
4622
4623It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4624merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4625repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4626contain the section.
4627
4628If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4629then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4630not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4631convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4632placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4633default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4634segment at all.
4635
4636@kindex FILEHDR
4637@kindex PHDRS
4638You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4639the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4640The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4641file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4642include the ELF program headers themselves.
4643
4644The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4645value of the keyword.
4646
4647@table @asis
4648@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4649Indicates an unused program header.
4650
4651@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4652Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4653the file.
4654
4655@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4656Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4657
4658@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4659Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4660found.
4661
4662@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4663Indicates a segment holding note information.
4664
4665@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4666A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4667ABI.
4668
4669@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4670Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4671
4672@item @var{expression}
4673An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4674be used for types not defined above.
4675@end table
4676
4677You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4678in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4679@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4680Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4681output section attribute.
4682
4683The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4684which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4685explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4686an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4687header.
4688
4689Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4690headers used on a native ELF system.
4691
4692@example
4693@group
4694PHDRS
4695@{
4696 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4697 interp PT_INTERP ;
4698 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4699 data PT_LOAD ;
4700 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4701@}
4702
4703SECTIONS
4704@{
4705 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4706 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4707 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4708 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4709 @dots{}
4710 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4711 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4712 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4713 @dots{}
4714@}
4715@end group
4716@end example
4717
4718@node VERSION
4719@section VERSION Command
4720@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4721@cindex symbol versions
4722@cindex version script
4723@cindex versions of symbols
4724The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4725only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4726symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4727a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4728shared library.
4729
4730You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4731you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4732also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4733
4734The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4735@smallexample
4736VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4737@end smallexample
4738
4739The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4740Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4741version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4742version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4743version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4744scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4745library.
4746
4747The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4748examples.
4749
4750@smallexample
4751VERS_1.1 @{
4752 global:
4753 foo1;
4754 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4755 old*;
4756 original*;
4757 new*;
252b5132
RH
4758@};
4759
4760VERS_1.2 @{
4761 foo2;
4762@} VERS_1.1;
4763
4764VERS_2.0 @{
4765 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4766 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4767 ns::*;
4768 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4769 @}
252b5132
RH
4770@} VERS_1.2;
4771@end smallexample
4772
4773This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4774version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4775The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4776a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4777of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4778symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4779is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4780in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4781However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4782name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4783
4784Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4785depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4786to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4787
4788Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4789depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4790and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4791
4792When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4793specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4794unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4795unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4796somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4797wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4798wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4799set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4800ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4801
4802The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4803they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4804could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4805However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4806
0f6bf451 4807Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4808in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4809symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4810won't.
4811
4812@smallexample
7c9c73be 4813@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4814@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4815
252b5132
RH
4816When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4817symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4818requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4819shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4820loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4821linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4822application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4823way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4824all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4825search for each symbol reference.
4826
4827The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4828doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4829that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4830functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4831the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4832required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4833that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4834versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4835the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4836
4837There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4838first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4839source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4840script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4841maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4842@smallexample
4843__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4844@end smallexample
4845@noindent
4846in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4847be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4848The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4849@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4850takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4851
4852The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4853function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4854an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4855version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4856linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4857
4858To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4859source file. Here is an example:
4860
4861@smallexample
4862__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4863__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4864__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4865__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4866@end smallexample
4867
4868In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4869unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4870example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4871@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4872
4873When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4874some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4875this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4876@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4877declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4878you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4879
4880If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4881within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4882(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4883specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4884
cb840a31
L
4885You can also specify the language in the version script:
4886
4887@smallexample
4888VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4889@end smallexample
4890
c0065db7 4891The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4892The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4893demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4894patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4895
86043bbb
MM
4896Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4897described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4898or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4899the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4900whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4901cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4902might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4903should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4904expect when you upgrade.
4905
252b5132
RH
4906@node Expressions
4907@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4908@cindex expressions
4909@cindex arithmetic
4910The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4911that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4912expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4913host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4914
4915You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4916
4917The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4918expressions.
4919
4920@menu
4921* Constants:: Constants
4922* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4923* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4924* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4925* Operators:: Operators
4926* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4927* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4928* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4929@end menu
4930
4931@node Constants
4932@subsection Constants
4933@cindex integer notation
4934@cindex constants in linker scripts
4935All constants are integers.
4936
4937As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4938octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4939hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4940@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4941@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4942value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4943
4944@cindex scaled integers
4945@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4946@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4947@cindex suffixes for integers
4948@cindex integer suffixes
4949In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4950constant by
4951@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4952@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4953@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4954@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4955@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4956@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4957@tex
4958${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4959@end tex
4960@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
4961respectively. For example, the following
4962all refer to the same quantity:
4963
252b5132 4964@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4965_fourk_1 = 4K;
4966_fourk_2 = 4096;
4967_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 4968_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
4969@end smallexample
4970
8a308ae8
NC
4971Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
4972conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
4973
252b5132
RH
4974@node Symbols
4975@subsection Symbol Names
4976@cindex symbol names
4977@cindex names
4978@cindex quoted symbol names
4979@kindex "
4980Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4981and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4982Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4983specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4984keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4985@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4986"SECTION" = 9;
4987"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4988@end smallexample
4989
4990Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4991to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4992whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4993
ecca9871
L
4994@node Orphan Sections
4995@subsection Orphan Sections
4996@cindex orphan
4997Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4998are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4999script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5000output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5001placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5002attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5003same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5004If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5005at the end of the file.
5006
5007For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5008well as section flag.
5009
41911f68 5010If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5011the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5012__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5013section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5014orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5015representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5016character.
5017
252b5132
RH
5018@node Location Counter
5019@subsection The Location Counter
5020@kindex .
5021@cindex dot
5022@cindex location counter
5023@cindex current output location
5024The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5025current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5026location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5027within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5028anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5029
5030@cindex holes
5031Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5032moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5033location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5034and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5035doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5036
5037@smallexample
5038SECTIONS
5039@{
5040 output :
5041 @{
5042 file1(.text)
5043 . = . + 1000;
5044 file2(.text)
5045 . += 1000;
5046 file3(.text)
563e308f 5047 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5048@}
5049@end smallexample
5050@noindent
5051In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5052located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5053followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5054@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5055@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5056specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5057
5c6bbab8
NC
5058@cindex dot inside sections
5059Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5060current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5061statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5062absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5063however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5064not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5065
5066@smallexample
5067SECTIONS
5068@{
5069 . = 0x100
5070 .text: @{
5071 *(.text)
5072 . = 0x200
5073 @}
5074 . = 0x500
5075 .data: @{
5076 *(.data)
5077 . += 0x600
5078 @}
5079@}
5080@end smallexample
5081
5082The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5083and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5084the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5085much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5086move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5087and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5088the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5089the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5090
b5666f2f
AM
5091@cindex dot outside sections
5092Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5093output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5094needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5095
5096@smallexample
5097SECTIONS
5098@{
5099 start_of_text = . ;
5100 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5101 end_of_text = . ;
5102
5103 start_of_data = . ;
5104 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5105 end_of_data = . ;
5106@}
5107@end smallexample
5108
5109If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5110not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5111between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5112should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5113blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5114the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5115sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5116statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5117special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5118place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5119as follows:
5120
5121@smallexample
5122SECTIONS
5123@{
5124 start_of_text = . ;
5125 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5126 end_of_text = . ;
5127
5128 start_of_data = . ;
5129 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5130 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5131 end_of_data = . ;
5132@}
5133@end smallexample
5134
5135This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5136@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5137placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5138assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5139a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5140section. So you could write:
5141
5142@smallexample
5143SECTIONS
5144@{
5145 start_of_text = . ;
5146 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5147 end_of_text = . ;
5148
5149 . = . ;
5150 start_of_data = . ;
5151 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5152 end_of_data = . ;
5153@}
5154@end smallexample
5155
5156Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5157@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5158
252b5132
RH
5159@need 2000
5160@node Operators
5161@subsection Operators
5162@cindex operators for arithmetic
5163@cindex arithmetic operators
5164@cindex precedence in expressions
5165The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5166the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5167@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5168@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5169@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5170@smallexample
5171precedence associativity Operators Notes
5172(highest)
51731 left ! - ~ (1)
51742 left * / %
51753 left + -
51764 left >> <<
51775 left == != > < <= >=
51786 left &
51797 left |
51808 left &&
51819 left ||
518210 right ? :
518311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5184(lowest)
5185@end smallexample
5186Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5187(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5188(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5189@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5190@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5191@tex
5192\vskip \baselineskip
5193%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5194\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5195\hrule
5196\halign
5197{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5198height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5199&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5200height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5201\noalign{\hrule}
5202height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5203&highest&&&&&\cr
5204% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5205&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5206&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5207&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5208&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5209&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5210&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5211&7&&left&&|&\cr
5212&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5213&9&&left&&||&\cr
5214&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5215&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5216&lowest&&&&&\cr
5217height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5218\hrule}
5219@end tex
5220@iftex
5221{
5222@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5223@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5224@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5225}
5226@end iftex
5227@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5228
5229@node Evaluation
5230@subsection Evaluation
5231@cindex lazy evaluation
5232@cindex expression evaluation order
5233The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5234an expression when absolutely necessary.
5235
5236The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5237address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5238regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5239as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5240
5241However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5242until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5243other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5244for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5245
5246The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5247assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5248allocation.
5249
5250Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5251@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5252
5253If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5254available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5255following
5256@smallexample
5257@group
5258SECTIONS
5259 @{
a1ab1d2a 5260 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5261 @{ *(.text) @}
5262 @}
5263@end group
5264@end smallexample
5265@noindent
5266will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5267address}.
5268
5269@node Expression Section
5270@subsection The Section of an Expression
5271@cindex expression sections
5272@cindex absolute expressions
5273@cindex relative expressions
5274@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5275@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5276@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5277When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5278or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5279fixed offset from the base of a section.
5280
5281The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5282whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5283an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5284section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5285
5286A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5287relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5288further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5289section will be the section of the relative expression.
5290
5291A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5292through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5293will not have any particular associated section.
5294
5295You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5296to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5297create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5298section @samp{.data}:
5299@smallexample
5300SECTIONS
5301 @{
5302 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5303 @}
5304@end smallexample
5305@noindent
5306If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5307@samp{.data} section.
5308
5309@node Builtin Functions
5310@subsection Builtin Functions
5311@cindex functions in expressions
5312The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5313use in linker script expressions.
5314
5315@table @code
5316@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5317@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5318@cindex expression, absolute
5319Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5320of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5321value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5322normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5323
5324@item ADDR(@var{section})
5325@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5326@cindex section address in expression
5327Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5328script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5329the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5330identical values:
5331@smallexample
5332@group
5333SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5334 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5335 @{
252b5132
RH
5336 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5337 @dots{}
5338 @}
5339 .output :
5340 @{
5341 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5342 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5343 @}
5344@dots{} @}
5345@end group
5346@end smallexample
5347
876f4090
NS
5348@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5349@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5350@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5351@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5352@cindex round up location counter
5353@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5354@cindex round up expression
5355@cindex align expression
5356Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5357to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5358doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5359arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5360expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5361equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5362
5363Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5364next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5365variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5366input sections:
252b5132
RH
5367@smallexample
5368@group
5369SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5370 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5371 *(.data)
5372 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5373 @}
5374@dots{} @}
5375@end group
5376@end smallexample
5377@noindent
5378The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5379a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5380a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5381of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5382
5383The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5384
362c1d1a
NS
5385@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5386@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5387@cindex section alignment
5388Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5389been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5390evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5391the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5392value in that section.
5393@smallexample
5394@group
5395SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5396 .output @{
5397 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5398 @dots{}
5399 @}
5400@dots{} @}
5401@end group
5402@end smallexample
5403
252b5132
RH
5404@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5405@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5406This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5407scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5408section.
5409
2d20f7bf
JJ
5410@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5411@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5412This is equivalent to either
5413@smallexample
5414(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5415@end smallexample
5416or
5417@smallexample
5418(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5419@end smallexample
5420@noindent
5421depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5422for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5423@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5424If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5425memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5426bytes in the on-disk file.
5427
5428This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5429any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5430@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5431be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5432working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5433
5434@noindent
5435Example:
5436@smallexample
5437 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5438@end smallexample
5439
5440@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5441@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5442This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5443evaluation purposes.
5444
5445@smallexample
5446 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5447@end smallexample
5448
a4f5ad88
JJ
5449@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5450@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5451This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5452@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5453When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5454does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5455@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5456boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5457it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5458@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5459
5460@smallexample
5461 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5462@end smallexample
5463
252b5132
RH
5464@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5465@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5466@cindex symbol defaults
5467Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5468defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5469return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5470default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5471shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5472the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5473existed, its value is preserved:
5474
5475@smallexample
5476@group
5477SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5478 .text : @{
5479 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5480 @dots{}
5481 @}
5482 @dots{}
5483@}
5484@end group
5485@end smallexample
5486
3ec57632
NC
5487@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5488@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5489Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5490
252b5132
RH
5491@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5492@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5493@cindex section load address in expression
5494Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5495the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5496attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5497Section LMA}).
5498
5499@kindex MAX
5500@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5501Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5502
5503@kindex MIN
5504@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5505Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5506
5507@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5508@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5509@cindex unallocated address, next
5510Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5511This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5512use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5513output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5514
3ec57632
NC
5515@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5516@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5517Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5518
ba916c8a
MM
5519@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5520@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5521Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5522value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5523option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5524@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5525be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5526``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5527name.
5528
252b5132
RH
5529@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5530@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5531@cindex section size
5532Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5533been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5534evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5535@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5536@smallexample
5537@group
5538SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5539 .output @{
5540 .start = . ;
5541 @dots{}
5542 .end = . ;
5543 @}
5544 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5545 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5546@dots{} @}
5547@end group
5548@end smallexample
5549
5550@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5551@itemx sizeof_headers
5552@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5553@cindex header size
5554Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5555information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5556this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5557choose, to facilitate paging.
5558
5559@cindex not enough room for program headers
5560@cindex program headers, not enough room
5561When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5562@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5563number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5564addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5565additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5566room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5567the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5568script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5569you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5570command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5571@end table
5572
5573@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5574@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5575@cindex implicit linker scripts
5576If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5577an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5578linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5579linker will report an error.
5580
5581An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5582
5583Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5584assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5585commands.
5586
5587Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5588at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5589read. This can affect archive searching.
5590
5591@ifset GENERIC
5592@node Machine Dependent
5593@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5594
5595@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5596@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5597sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5598functionality are not listed.
5599
5600@menu
36f63dca
NC
5601@ifset H8300
5602* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5603@end ifset
5604@ifset I960
5605* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5606@end ifset
5607@ifset ARM
5608* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5609@end ifset
5610@ifset HPPA
5611* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5612@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5613@ifset M68K
5614* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5615@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5616@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5617* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5618@end ifset
2469cfa2 5619@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5620* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5621@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5622@ifset M68HC11
5623* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5624@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5625@ifset POWERPC
5626* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5627@end ifset
5628@ifset POWERPC64
5629* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5630@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5631@ifset SPU
5632* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5633@end ifset
74459f0e 5634@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5635* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5636@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5637@ifset WIN32
5638* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5639@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5640@ifset XTENSA
5641* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5642@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5643@end menu
5644@end ifset
5645
252b5132
RH
5646@ifset H8300
5647@ifclear GENERIC
5648@raisesections
5649@end ifclear
5650
5651@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5652@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5653
5654@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5655For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5656you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5657
5658@table @emph
5659@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5660@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5661@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5662targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5663program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5664respectively.
5665
5666@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5667@item synthesizing instructions
5668@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5669@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5670sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5671page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5672(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5673@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5674top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5675
5676@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5677@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5678biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5679which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5680page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5681(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5682@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5683the top page of memory).
5684
5685@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5686@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
568732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5688changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5689(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5690@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5691the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5692@end table
5693
5694@ifclear GENERIC
5695@lowersections
5696@end ifclear
5697@end ifset
5698
36f63dca 5699@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5700@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5701@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5702@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5703@node Renesas
5704@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5705
c2dcd04e
NC
5706@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5707H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5708options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5709@end ifset
5710@end ifclear
5711
5712@ifset I960
5713@ifclear GENERIC
5714@raisesections
5715@end ifclear
5716
5717@node i960
5718@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5719
5720@cindex i960 support
5721
5722You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5723specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5724family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5725incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5726linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5727libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5728search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5729
5730For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5731well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5732paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5733the names
5734
5735@smallexample
5736@group
5737try
5738libtry.a
5739tryca
5740libtryca.a
5741@end group
5742@end smallexample
5743
5744@noindent
5745The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5746two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5747
5748You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5749the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5750use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5751specifies a library.
5752
5753@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5754@cindex relaxing on i960
5755@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5756you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5757@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5758them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5759instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5760instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5761target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5762not itself call any subroutines).
5763
5764@ifclear GENERIC
5765@lowersections
5766@end ifclear
5767@end ifset
5768
5769@ifset ARM
5770@ifclear GENERIC
5771@raisesections
5772@end ifclear
5773
93fd0973
SC
5774@ifset M68HC11
5775@ifclear GENERIC
5776@raisesections
5777@end ifclear
5778
5779@node M68HC11/68HC12
5780@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5781
5782@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5783
5784@subsection Linker Relaxation
5785
5786For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5787optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5788
5789@table @emph
5790@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5791@item relaxing address modes
5792@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5793targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5794program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5795respectively.
5796
5797@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5798transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5799page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5800
5801@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5802When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5803of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5804addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5805@code{bset} instructions.
5806
5807@end table
5808
5809@subsection Trampoline Generation
5810
5811@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5812@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5813For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5814call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5815will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5816trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5817case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5818point to the function trampoline.
5819
5820@ifclear GENERIC
5821@lowersections
5822@end ifclear
5823@end ifset
5824
36f63dca 5825@node ARM
3674e28a 5826@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5827
5828@cindex ARM interworking support
5829@kindex --support-old-code
5830For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5831between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5832been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5833line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5834libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5835option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5836given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5837which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5838the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5839non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5840
5841@cindex thumb entry point
5842@cindex entry point, thumb
5843@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5844The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5845@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5846But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5847branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5848executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5849
ce11ba6c
KT
5850@cindex PE import table prefixing
5851@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5852The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5853the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5854elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5855import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5856
e489d0ae
PB
5857@cindex BE8
5858@kindex --be8
5859The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5860executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5861The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5862
3674e28a
PB
5863@cindex TARGET1
5864@kindex --target1-rel
5865@kindex --target1-abs
5866The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5867@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5868or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5869and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5870
5871@cindex TARGET2
5872@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5873The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5874@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5875meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5876@table @samp
5877@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5878@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5879@item abs
5880@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5881@item got-rel
5882@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5883@end table
5884
319850b4
JB
5885@cindex FIX_V4BX
5886@kindex --fix-v4bx
5887The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5888specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5889interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5890also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5891
5892In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5893linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5894@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5895
5896In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5897relocations are ignored.
5898
845b51d6
PB
5899@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5900@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5901Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5902relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5903
5904@smallexample
5905TST rM, #1
5906MOVEQ PC, rM
5907BX Rn
5908@end smallexample
5909
5910This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5911and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5912condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5913
33bfe774
JB
5914@cindex USE_BLX
5915@kindex --use-blx
5916The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5917BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5918situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5919code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5920each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5921
5922This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5923specify it if you are using that target.
5924
c6dd86c6
JB
5925@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5926@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5927The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5928bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5929instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5930to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5931the support code can read the intended values.
5932
5933The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5934intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5935and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5936intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5937full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5938you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5939
5940If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5941enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5942@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5943mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5944vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5945@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5946
5947If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5948potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5949such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5950first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5951instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5952the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5953are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5954
bf21ed78
MS
5955@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5956@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5957The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5958warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5959enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5960linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5961using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5962not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5963
5964@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5965@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5966The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5967warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5968@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5969linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5970using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5971
726150b7
NC
5972@cindex PIC_VENEER
5973@kindex --pic-veneer
5974The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5975ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5976is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5977@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5978
5979@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5980@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5981The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5982code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5983perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5984placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5985controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5986The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5987duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5988group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5989code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5990where they should be placed.
5991
5992The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5993@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 5994placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
5995branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5996placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5997value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5998exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5999A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6000linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6001from the input sections.
6002
6003The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6004@samp{N = +1}.
6005
1a51c1a4
NC
6006Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6007only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6008otherwise.
6009
36f63dca
NC
6010@ifclear GENERIC
6011@lowersections
6012@end ifclear
6013@end ifset
6014
6015@ifset HPPA
6016@ifclear GENERIC
6017@raisesections
6018@end ifclear
6019
6020@node HPPA ELF32
6021@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6022@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6023@kindex --multi-subspace
6024When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6025import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6026The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6027stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6028multiple sub-spaces.
6029
6030@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6031@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6032Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6033stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6034@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6035sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6036a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6037the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6038conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6039prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6040A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6041branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6042@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6043@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6044detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6045positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6046
6047Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6048single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6049create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6050large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6051
6052@ifclear GENERIC
6053@lowersections
6054@end ifclear
6055@end ifset
6056
7fb9f789
NC
6057@ifset M68K
6058@ifclear GENERIC
6059@raisesections
6060@end ifclear
6061
6062@node M68K
6063@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6064
6065@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6066@kindex --got=@var{type}
6067The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6068The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6069@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6070the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6071@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6072entries only at non-negative offsets.
6073@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6074entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6075support such GOTs.
6076@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6077output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6078file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6079files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6080
6081@ifclear GENERIC
6082@lowersections
6083@end ifclear
6084@end ifset
6085
36f63dca
NC
6086@ifset MMIX
6087@ifclear GENERIC
6088@raisesections
6089@end ifclear
6090
6091@node MMIX
6092@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6093For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6094@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6095understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6096can translate between the two formats.
6097
6098There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6099Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6100registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6101equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6102@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6103global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6104this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6105symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6106
7a2de473
HPN
6107Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6108@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6109The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6110of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6111
6112Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6113are left out from an mmo file.
6114
6115@ifclear GENERIC
6116@lowersections
6117@end ifclear
6118@end ifset
6119
6120@ifset MSP430
6121@ifclear GENERIC
6122@raisesections
6123@end ifclear
6124
6125@node MSP430
6126@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6127For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6128will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6129just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6130
6131@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6132The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6133
6134@table @code
6135@item @samp{.vectors}
6136Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6137
6138@item @samp{.bootloader}
6139Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6140in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6141
6142@item @samp{.infomem}
6143Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6144this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6145
c0065db7 6146@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6147This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6148in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6149
6150@item @samp{.noinit}
6151Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6152
c0065db7 6153The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6154@end table
6155
6156@ifclear GENERIC
6157@lowersections
6158@end ifclear
6159@end ifset
6160
2a60a7a8
AM
6161@ifset POWERPC
6162@ifclear GENERIC
6163@raisesections
6164@end ifclear
6165
6166@node PowerPC ELF32
6167@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6168@cindex PowerPC long branches
6169@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6170Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6171displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6172@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6173@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6174the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6175section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6176section exceeds 33M in size.
6177
6178@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6179@table @option
6180@cindex PowerPC PLT
6181@kindex --bss-plt
6182@item --bss-plt
6183Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6184generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6185the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6186writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6187@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6188PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6189compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6190BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6191
016687f8
AM
6192@kindex --secure-plt
6193@item --secure-plt
6194@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6195@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6196when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6197layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6198style BSS PLT.
6199
2a60a7a8
AM
6200@cindex PowerPC GOT
6201@kindex --sdata-got
6202@item --sdata-got
6203The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6204sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6205@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6206section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6207@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6208@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6209@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6210@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6211PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6212pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6213GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6214really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6215
6216@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6217@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6218@item --emit-stub-syms
6219This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6220symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6221
6222@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6223@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6224@item --no-tls-optimize
6225PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6226sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6227disable the optimization.
6228@end table
6229
6230@ifclear GENERIC
6231@lowersections
6232@end ifclear
6233@end ifset
6234
6235@ifset POWERPC64
6236@ifclear GENERIC
6237@raisesections
6238@end ifclear
6239
6240@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6241@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6242
6243@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6244@table @option
6245@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6246@kindex --stub-group-size
6247@item --stub-group-size
6248Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6249by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6250@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6251sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6252a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6253the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6254conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6255prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6256A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6257branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6258@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6259@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6260detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6261positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6262
6263Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6264single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6265create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6266large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6267
6268@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6269@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6270@item --emit-stub-syms
6271This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6272symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6273
6274@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6275@kindex --dotsyms
6276@kindex --no-dotsyms
6277@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6278These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6279in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6280function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6281code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6282properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6283to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6284@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6285dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6286feature.
6287
6288@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6289@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6290@item --no-tls-optimize
6291PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6292sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6293disable the optimization.
6294
6295@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6296@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6297@item --no-opd-optimize
6298PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6299corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6300the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6301Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6302
6303@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6304@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6305@item --non-overlapping-opd
6306Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6307@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6308the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6309entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6310
6311@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6312@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6313@item --no-toc-optimize
6314PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6315entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6316reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6317marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6318marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6319relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6320unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6321reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6322discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6323reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6324code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6325optimization.
6326
6327@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6328@kindex --no-multi-toc
6329@item --no-multi-toc
6330By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6331entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6332total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6333grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6334TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6335calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6336help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
633764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6338Use this option to turn off this feature.
6339@end table
6340
6341@ifclear GENERIC
6342@lowersections
6343@end ifclear
6344@end ifset
6345
49fa1e15
AM
6346@ifset SPU
6347@ifclear GENERIC
6348@raisesections
6349@end ifclear
6350
6351@node SPU ELF
6352@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6353
6354@cindex SPU ELF options
6355@table @option
6356
6357@cindex SPU plugins
6358@kindex --plugin
6359@item --plugin
6360This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6361
6362@cindex SPU overlays
6363@kindex --no-overlays
6364@item --no-overlays
6365Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6366regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6367@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6368turns off all this special overlay handling.
6369
6370@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6371@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6372@item --emit-stub-syms
6373This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6374symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6375
6376@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6377@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6378@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6379This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6380function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6381on calls to non-overlay regions.
6382
6383@cindex SPU local store size
6384@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6385@item --local-store=lo:hi
6386@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6387the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6388range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6389
c0065db7 6390@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6391@kindex --stack-analysis
6392@item --stack-analysis
6393SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6394unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6395under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6396@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6397@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6398determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6399for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6400for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6401for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6402find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6403and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6404under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6405dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6406is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6407and calls will be given.
6408
c0065db7 6409@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6410@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6411@item --emit-stack-syms
6412This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6413in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6414These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6415functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6416functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6417such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6418The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6419@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6420@end table
6421
6422@ifclear GENERIC
6423@lowersections
6424@end ifclear
6425@end ifset
6426
36f63dca
NC
6427@ifset TICOFF
6428@ifclear GENERIC
6429@raisesections
6430@end ifclear
6431
6432@node TI COFF
6433@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6434@cindex TI COFF versions
6435@kindex --format=@var{version}
6436The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6437TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6438also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6439format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6440header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6441
6442@ifclear GENERIC
6443@lowersections
6444@end ifclear
6445@end ifset
6446
2ca22b03
NC
6447@ifset WIN32
6448@ifclear GENERIC
6449@raisesections
6450@end ifclear
6451
6452@node WIN32
6453@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6454
c0065db7 6455This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6456See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6457command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6458
6459@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6460@cindex import libraries
6461@item import libraries
69da35b5 6462The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6463libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6464regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6465archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6466support for creating such libraries provided with the
6467@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6468
c0065db7
RM
6469@item exporting DLL symbols
6470@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6471The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6472
6473@table @emph
6474@item using auto-export functionality
6475@cindex using auto-export functionality
6476By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6477which is controlled by the following command line options:
6478
0a5d968e
NC
6479@itemize
6480@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6481@item --exclude-symbols
6482@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6483@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6484@end itemize
6485
c0065db7 6486If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6487command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6488if either of the following are true:
6489
6490@itemize
6491@item A DEF file is used.
6492@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6493@end itemize
dc8465bf 6494
c0065db7
RM
6495@item using a DEF file
6496@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6497Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6498an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6499exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6500name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6501command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6502
6503@example
6504gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6505@end example
6506
0a5d968e
NC
6507Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6508@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6509
dc8465bf
NC
6510Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6511
6512@example
4b5bd4e7 6513LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6514
6515EXPORTS
6516foo
6517bar
6518_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6519another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6520var1 DATA
c0065db7 6521@end example
dc8465bf 6522
4b5bd4e7
DS
6523This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6524symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6525alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6526by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6527@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6528@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6529
6b31ad16
DS
6530The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6531name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6532the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6533
b45619c0
NC
6534When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6535library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6536@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6537executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6538
6539With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6540specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6541non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6542
6543If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6544or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6545filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6546
4b5bd4e7
DS
6547The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6548
6549@example
6550EXPORTS
6551 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6552 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6553 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6554@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6555
6556Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6557@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6558@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6559@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6560Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6561@samp{<integer>} alias.
6562
6563The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6564
6565@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6566will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6567by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6568linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6569library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6570
6571@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6572The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6573the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6574@code{*_imp__foo}).
6575
6576@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6577well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6578read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6579variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6580the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6581extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6582application will behave unexpectedly.
6583
6584@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6585it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6586symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6587API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6588the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6589
4b5bd4e7
DS
6590See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6591other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6592
6593@cindex creating a DEF file
6594While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6595with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6596
6597@item Using decorations
6598@cindex Using decorations
6599Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6600itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6601declared as:
6602
6603@example
6604__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6605__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6606@end example
6607
6608All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6609any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6610this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6611the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6612
6613Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6614decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6615instead:
6616
6617@example
6618__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6619__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6620@end example
6621
c0065db7
RM
6622This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6623when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6624variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6625code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6626of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6627omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6628@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6629information.
c0065db7 6630@end table
dc8465bf 6631
2ca22b03
NC
6632@cindex automatic data imports
6633@item automatic data imports
6634The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6635by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6636compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6637issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6638code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6639c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6640initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6641decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6642platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6643command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6644The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6645suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6646trigger the feature's use.
6647
c0065db7 6648auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6649additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6650
c0065db7 6651"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6652documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6653
c0065db7
RM
6654The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6655occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6656One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6657below.
6658
6659@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6660For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6661object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6662offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6663field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6664in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6665without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6666The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6667references.
6668
c0065db7
RM
6669The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6670be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6671themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6672runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6673compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6674support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6675run without error on an older system.
6676
c0065db7
RM
6677@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6678enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6679
6680@cindex direct linking to a dll
6681@item direct linking to a dll
6682The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6683including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6684libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6685traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6686libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6687function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6688though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6689storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6690tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6691large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6692
c0065db7 6693Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6694@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6695of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6696perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6697select the dll instead of an import library.
6698
2ca22b03 6699
69da35b5
NC
6700For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6701to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6702
6703@example
45e948fe
NC
6704libxxx.dll.a
6705xxx.dll.a
6706libxxx.a
6707xxx.lib
69da35b5 6708cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6709libxxx.dll
6710xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6711@end example
6712
69da35b5
NC
6713before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6714
c0065db7
RM
6715(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6716where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6717@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6718file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6719@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6720
c0065db7
RM
6721Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6722@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6723was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6724various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6725could coexist on the same machine.
6726
2ca22b03
NC
6727The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6728applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6729libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6730
6731@example
6732bin/
6733 cygxxx.dll
6734lib/
6735 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6736 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6737@end example
6738
c0065db7
RM
6739Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6740done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6741
67421. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6743@example
6744gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6745@end example
2ca22b03 6746
69da35b5
NC
6747However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6748(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6749@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6750not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6751
2ca22b03
NC
67522. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6753directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6754should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6755making the app/dll.
6756
6757@example
6758ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6759@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6760
6761Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6762
6763@example
6764gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6765@end example
69da35b5
NC
6766
6767This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6768perfectly legal
6769
6770@example
6771bin/
6772 cygxxx-5.dll
6773lib/
c0065db7 6774 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6775@end example
6776
dc8465bf 6777Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6778even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6779@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6780
6781Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6782wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6783
67841. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6785work with auto-imported data.
6786
dc8465bf
NC
67872. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6788import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6789symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6790for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6791possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6792
45e948fe
NC
67933. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6794critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6795in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6796stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6797
69da35b5 6798So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6799true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6800a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6801binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6802massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6803requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6804will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6805
c0065db7 6806@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6807@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6808@item adding additional names
6809Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6810A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6811exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6812when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6813import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6814
c0065db7 6815@example
dc8465bf
NC
6816LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6817
6818EXPORTS
c0065db7 6819foo
dc8465bf 6820_foo = foo
c0065db7 6821@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6822
6823The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6824
6825Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6826source code using the "weak" attribute:
6827
c0065db7
RM
6828@example
6829void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6830void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6831@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6832
6833See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6834symbols.
6835
6836@item renaming symbols
6837Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6838kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6839@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6840DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6841created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6842
c0065db7 6843@example
dc8465bf
NC
6844LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6845
6846EXPORTS
6847_foo = foo
c0065db7 6848@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6849
6850The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6851@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6852@end table
dc8465bf 6853
0a5d968e 6854Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6855unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6856If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6857@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6858that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6859@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6860renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6861to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6862the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6863In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6864which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6865
6866@cindex weak externals
6867@item weak externals
6868The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6869weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6870defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6871are three variants of weak externals:
6872@itemize
6873@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6874called lazy externals.
6875@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6876This form is not presently implemented.
6877@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6878implemented.
6879@end itemize
6880As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6881are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6882uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6883@end table
6884
6885@ifclear GENERIC
6886@lowersections
6887@end ifclear
6888@end ifset
6889
e0001a05
NC
6890@ifset XTENSA
6891@ifclear GENERIC
6892@raisesections
6893@end ifclear
6894
6895@node Xtensa
6896@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6897
6898@cindex Xtensa processors
6899The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6900@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6901specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6902keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6903example, with the command:
6904
6905@smallexample
6906SECTIONS
6907@{
6908 .text : @{
6909 *(.literal .text)
6910 @}
6911@}
6912@end smallexample
6913
6914@noindent
6915@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6916and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6917literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6918interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6919group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6920files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6921and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6922
43cd72b9 6923@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6924@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6925Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6926provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6927is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6928literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6929will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6930location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6931the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6932unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6933@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6934range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6935
6936For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6937to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6938instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6939instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6940instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6941@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6942hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6943By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6944switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6945density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6946instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6947performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6948linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6949a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6950
6951The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6952control the linker:
6953
6954@cindex Xtensa options
6955@table @option
e0001a05 6956@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6957@item --no-relax
6958Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6959by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6960relaxation.
6961
6962@item --size-opt
6963When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6964more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6965no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6966alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6967preserve the correctness of the code.
6968@end table
e0001a05
NC
6969
6970@ifclear GENERIC
6971@lowersections
6972@end ifclear
6973@end ifset
6974
252b5132
RH
6975@ifclear SingleFormat
6976@node BFD
6977@chapter BFD
6978
6979@cindex back end
6980@cindex object file management
6981@cindex object formats available
6982@kindex objdump -i
6983The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6984These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6985object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6986format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6987it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6988associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6989object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6990(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6991list all the formats available for your configuration.
6992
6993@cindex BFD requirements
6994@cindex requirements for BFD
6995As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6996several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6997BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6998formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6999been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7000BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7001may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7002
7003One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7004mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7005useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7006conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7007
7008@menu
7009* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7010@end menu
7011
7012@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7013@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7014@cindex opening object files
7015@include bfdsumm.texi
7016@end ifclear
7017
7018@node Reporting Bugs
7019@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7020@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7021@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7022
ff5dcc92 7023Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7024
7025Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7026it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7027to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7028work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7029@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7030
7031In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7032information that enables us to fix the bug.
7033
7034@menu
7035* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7036* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7037@end menu
7038
7039@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7040@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7041@cindex bug criteria
7042
7043If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7044
7045@itemize @bullet
7046@cindex fatal signal
7047@cindex linker crash
7048@cindex crash of linker
7049@item
7050If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7051@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7052
7053@cindex error on valid input
7054@item
ff5dcc92 7055If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7056
7057@cindex invalid input
7058@item
ff5dcc92 7059If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7060may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7061object files are correct.
7062
7063@item
7064If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7065improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7066@end itemize
7067
7068@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7069@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7070@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7071@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7072
7073A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7074products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7075recommend you contact that organization first.
7076
7077You can find contact information for many support companies and
7078individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7079distribution.
7080
ad22bfe8 7081@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7082Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7083@value{BUGURL}.
7084@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7085
7086The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7087@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7088fact or leave it out, state it!
7089
7090Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7091problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7092assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7093matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7094the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7095location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7096were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7097into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7098specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7099and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7100
7101Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7102the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7103on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7104
7105Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7106bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7107respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7108You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7109
7110To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7111
7112@itemize @bullet
7113@item
ff5dcc92 7114The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7115the @samp{--version} argument.
7116
7117Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7118the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7119
7120@item
ff5dcc92 7121Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7122patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7123
7124@item
7125The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7126version number.
7127
7128@item
ff5dcc92 7129What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7130``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7131
7132@item
7133The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7134observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7135list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7136sufficient.
7137
7138If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7139and then we might not encounter the bug.
7140
7141@item
7142A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7143bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7144provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7145bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7146state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7147requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7148we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7149attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7150
7151If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7152@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7153object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7154@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7155how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7156
7157@item
7158A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7159incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7160
ff5dcc92 7161Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7162will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7163not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7164a chance to make a mistake.
7165
7166Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7167say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7168copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7169C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7170and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7171fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7172you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7173any conclusion from our observations.
7174
7175@item
ff5dcc92 7176If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7177diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7178@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7179If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7180context, not by line number.
7181
7182The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7183sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7184@end itemize
7185
7186Here are some things that are not necessary:
7187
7188@itemize @bullet
7189@item
7190A description of the envelope of the bug.
7191
7192Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7193which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7194changes will not affect it.
7195
7196This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7197will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7198with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7199We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7200
7201Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7202of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7203output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7204less time, and so on.
7205
7206However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7207report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7208
7209@item
7210A patch for the bug.
7211
7212A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7213the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7214a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7215to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7216
ff5dcc92 7217Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7218construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7219through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7220able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7221fixed.
7222
7223And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7224patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7225help us to understand.
7226
7227@item
7228A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7229
7230Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7231things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7232@end itemize
7233
7234@node MRI
7235@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7236@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7237To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7238linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7239alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7240described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7241simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7242@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7243linker commands; these commands are described here.
7244
7245In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7246file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7247features to make use of them.
7248
7249You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7250@samp{-c} command-line option.
7251
7252Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7253command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7254blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7255MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7256issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7257
7258Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7259
7260You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7261lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7262The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7263
7264@table @code
7265@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7266@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7267@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7268Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7269the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7270@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7271your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7272script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7273commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7274input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7275@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7276
7277@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7278@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7279Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7280in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7281
7282@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7283
7284@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7285@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7286Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7287@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7288
7289@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7290@item BASE @var{expression}
7291Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7292absolute addresses) in the output file.
7293
7294@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7295@item CHIP @var{expression}
7296@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7297This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7298
7299@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7300@item END
7301This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7302
7303@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7304@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7305Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7306language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7307
7308@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7309@item
252b5132
RH
7310S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7311
7312@item
7313IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7314
7315@item
7316COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7317@samp{COFF}
7318@end enumerate
7319
7320@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7321@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7322Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7323@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7324
7325The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7326same line, with no change in its effect.
7327
7328@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7329@item LOAD @var{filename}
7330@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7331Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7332same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7333command line.
7334
7335@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7336@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7337@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7338MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7339option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7340
7341@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7342@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7343@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7344Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7345order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7346script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7347sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7348file, in the order specified.
7349
7350@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7351@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7352@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7353@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7354Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7355@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7356
7357@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7358@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7359@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7360@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7361You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7362specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7363If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7364@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7365@end table
7366
793c5807
NC
7367@node GNU Free Documentation License
7368@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7369@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7370
370b66a1
CD
7371@node LD Index
7372@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7373
7374@printindex cp
7375
7376@tex
7377% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7378% meantime:
7379\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7380\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7381\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7382\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7383\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7384\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7385\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7386\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7387\page\colophon
7388% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7389@end tex
7390
252b5132 7391@bye